tinc/doc/texinfo.tex

7087 lines
222 KiB
TeX
Raw Normal View History

2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
%
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\texinfoversion{2005-01-30.17}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Foundation, Inc.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
% your option) any later version.
%
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
% General Public License for more details.
%
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% tex foo.texi
% texindex foo.??
% tex foo.texi
% tex foo.texi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
% full Texinfo distribution.
%
% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{Basics,}
\chardef\other=12
% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
\let\+ = \relax
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\ptexb=\b
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
\let\ptexc=\c
\let\ptexcomma=\,
\let\ptexdot=\.
\let\ptexdots=\dots
\let\ptexend=\end
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
\let\ptexexclam=\!
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
\let\ptexgtr=>
\let\ptexhat=^
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\ptexi=\i
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\ptexindent=\indent
\let\ptexinsert=\insert
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\ptexless=<
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\ptexplus=+
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\ptexslash=\/
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\ptexstar=\*
\let\ptext=\t
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
% starts a new line in the output.
\newlinechar = `^^J
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
%
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
\let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
\else
\def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
%
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
%
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
% In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
% in some cases the escape char.
\chardef\colonChar = `\:
\chardef\commaChar = `\,
\chardef\dotChar = `\.
\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
\chardef\questChar = `\?
\chardef\semiChar = `\;
\chardef\underChar = `\_
\chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
\chardef\spacecat = 10
\def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Ignore a token.
%
\def\gobble#1{}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% The following is used inside several \edef's.
\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
% Hyphenation fixes.
\hyphenation{
Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
spell-ing spell-ings
stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
wide-spread wrap-around
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newdimen\bindingoffset
\newdimen\normaloffset
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
%
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
%
\def\|{%
% \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
\leavevmode
%
% Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
\vadjust{%
% We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
% leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
\vskip-\baselineskip
%
% \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
% the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
\llap{%
%
% For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
\vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
%
% This is the space between the bar and the text.
\hskip 12pt
}%
}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\loggingall{%
\tracingstats2
\tracingpages1
\tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
\tracingparagraphs1
\tracingoutput1
\tracingmacros2
\tracingrestores1
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
\tracingscantokens1
\tracingifs1
\tracinggroups1
\tracingnesting2
\tracingassigns1
\fi
\tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
\errorcontextlines16
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
%
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
\removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
\removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
\removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% For @cropmarks command.
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newif\ifcropmarks
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
%
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
%
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
% Main output routine.
\chardef\PAGE = 255
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
\newbox\headlinebox
\newbox\footlinebox
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
\def\onepageout#1{%
\ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
%
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
%
% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
%
{%
% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
% before the \shipout runs.
%
\escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
\indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
\normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
% the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
\shipout\vbox{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
\ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
\hsize = \outerhsize
\vskip-\topandbottommargin
\vtop to0pt{%
\line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
\nointerlineskip
\line{%
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
\hfill
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
}%
\vss}%
\vskip\topandbottommargin
\line\bgroup
\hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
\vbox\bgroup
\fi
%
\unvbox\headlinebox
\pagebody{#1}%
\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
\vskip 2\baselineskip
\unvbox\footlinebox
\fi
%
\ifcropmarks
\egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
\hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
\vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
\boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
\vbox to0pt{\vss
\line{%
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
\hfill
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
}%
\nointerlineskip
\line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
}%
\egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
\fi
}% end of \shipout\vbox
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}% end of group with \normalturnoffactive
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\advancepageno
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
}
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
{\catcode`\@ =11
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
\rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
}
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
%
\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
\def\nstop{\vbox
{\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
\def\nsbot{\vbox
{\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
\def\next{#2}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\begingroup
\obeylines
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\spaceisspace
#1%
\parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
{\obeylines %
\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
%
% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @end itemize @c foo
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
% by \finishparsearg.
%
\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
\def\temp{#3}%
\ifx\temp\empty
% We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run;
% thus we reuse \temp.
\let\temp\finishparsearg
\else
\let\temp\argcheckspaces
\fi
% Put the space token in:
\temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
% just before passing the control to \next.
% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
%
\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}}
% \parseargdef\foo{...}
% is roughly equivalent to
% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
%
% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
\def\parseargdef#1{%
\expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
}
\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
\def#2{\parsearg#1}%
\def#1##1%
}
% Several utility definitions with active space:
{
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\obeyspaces
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\gdef\obeyedspace{ }
% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
% should produce a line of output anyway.
%
\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
\gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
%
% \envdef\foo{...}
% \def\Efoo{...}
%
% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
%
% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The
% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
% special case.)
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% At runtime, environments start with this:
\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
% initialize
\let\thisenv\empty
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Check whether we're in the right environment:
\def\checkenv#1{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\thisenv\temp
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\badenverr
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
\def\badenverr{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\errhelp = \EMsimple
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
}
\def\inenvironment#1{%
\ifx#1\empty
out of any environment%
\else
in environment \expandafter\string#1%
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\end{%
\if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
\else
% The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
\expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
\csname E#1\endcsname
\endgroup
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%% Simple single-character @ commands
% @@ prints an @
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
% This is turned off because it was never documented
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
%% but suppressing ligatures.
%\def\`{{`}}
%\def\'{{'}}
% Used to generate quoted braces.
\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
\let\{=\mylbrace
\let\}=\myrbrace
\begingroup
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
% and @{ and @} for the aux file.
\catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
!gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
!gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
!gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
!gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
!endgroup
% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
\let\comma = ,
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\, = \c
\let\dotaccent = \.
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
\let\tieaccent = \t
\let\ubaraccent = \b
\let\udotaccent = \d
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\questiondown{?`}
\def\exclamdown{!`}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
\def\imacro{i}
\def\jmacro{j}
\def\dotless#1{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
\else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
\else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
\fi\fi
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
% \scriptscriptstyle).
%
\def\LaTeX{%
L\kern-.36em
{\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
\vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
\kern-.15em
\TeX
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
{\catcode`@ = 11
% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
% if the definition is written into an index file.
\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
}
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
% @* forces a line break.
\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @/ allows a line break.
\let\/=\allowbreak
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
% the text is small, which looks bad.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
%
\newbox\groupbox
\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
%
\envdef\group{%
\ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\startsavinginserts
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
% the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
% should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
% manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
\comment
}
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
% above. But it's pretty close.
\def\Egroup{%
% To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
% and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
\endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
\global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
\egroup % End the \vtop.
% \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
\dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
% \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
\dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
% if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
% group, force a page break.
\ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
\ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
\page
\fi
\fi
\box\groupbox
\prevdepth = \dimen1
\checkinserts
}
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
%
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
% @need space-in-mils
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
% Old definition--didn't work.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%\parseargdef\need{\par %
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
%{\baselineskip=0pt%
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
%\prevdepth=-1000pt
%}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\need{%
% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% paragraph.
\par
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
\dimen0 = #1\mil
\dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
\advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
\ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
%
% Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
% normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
% And a page break here is fine.
\vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
%
% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
%
% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
% document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
\penalty9999
%
% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
\kern -#1\mil
%
% Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
\nobreak
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\br = \par
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @page forces the start of a new page.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
% @exdent text....
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
\newskip\exdentamount
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
\nobreak
\kern-\strutdepth
\vtop to \strutdepth{%
\baselineskip=\strutdepth
\vss
% if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
% make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
\ifx#1l%
\llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
\else
\rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
\fi
\null
}%
}}
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
%
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
% else use TEXT for both).
%
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
\def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
\def\righttext{#2}%
\else
\def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
\def\righttext{#1}%
\fi
%
\ifodd\pageno
\def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
\else
\def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
\fi
\temp
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @include file insert text of that file as input.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
\def\includezzz#1{%
\pushthisfilestack
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\thisfile{#1}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
{%
\makevalueexpandable
\def\temp{\input #1 }%
\expandafter
}\temp
\popthisfilestack
}
\def\filenamecatcodes{%
\catcode`\\=\other
\catcode`~=\other
\catcode`^=\other
\catcode`_=\other
\catcode`|=\other
\catcode`<=\other
\catcode`>=\other
\catcode`+=\other
\catcode`-=\other
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\pushthisfilestack{%
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
}
\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
}
\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
\gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
the stack of filenames is empty.}}
\def\thisfile{}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @center line
% outputs that line, centered.
%
\parseargdef\center{%
\ifhmode
\let\next\centerH
\else
\let\next\centerV
\fi
\next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
}
\def\centerH#1{%
{%
\hfil\break
\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
\line{#1}%
\break
}%
}
\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
% @c is the same as @comment
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
\commentxxx}
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
\let\c=\comment
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
\def\noneword{none}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\asisword
\else
\ifx\temp\noneword
\defaultparindent = 0pt
\else
\defaultparindent = #1em
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
\parindent = \defaultparindent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @exampleindent NCHARS
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\asisword
\else
\ifx\temp\noneword
\lispnarrowing = 0pt
\else
\lispnarrowing = #1em
\fi
\fi
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @firstparagraphindent WORD
% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
% paragraphs.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
% By default, we suppress indentation.
%
\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
\def\insertword{insert}
%
\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\noneword
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
\else\ifx\temp\insertword
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
\fi\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
% paragraph.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
\gdef\indent{%
\restorefirstparagraphindent
\indent
}%
\gdef\noindent{%
\restorefirstparagraphindent
\noindent
}%
\global\everypar = {%
\kern -\parindent
\restorefirstparagraphindent
}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
\global \let \indent = \ptexindent
\global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
\global \everypar = {}%
}
% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\asis#1{#1}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
% which is what @var uses.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
{
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode\underChar = \active
\gdef\mathunderscore{%
\catcode\underChar=\active
\def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
% otherwise define @\.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
%
\def\math{%
\tex
\mathunderscore
\let\\ = \mathbackslash
\mathactive
$\finishmath
}
\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
%
{
\catcode`^ = \active
\catcode`< = \active
\catcode`> = \active
\catcode`+ = \active
\gdef\mathactive{%
\let^ = \ptexhat
\let< = \ptexless
\let> = \ptexgtr
\let+ = \ptexplus
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
\def\minus{$-$}
% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
% font as three actual period characters.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\dots{%
\leavevmode
\hbox to 1.5em{%
\hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil
.\hfil.\hfil.%
\hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\enddots{%
\dots
\spacefactor=3000
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
% Texinfo's parsing.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\comma = ,
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @refill is a no-op.
\let\refill=\relax
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
%
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
\def\setfilename{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
\iflinks
\tryauxfile
% Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
\immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
\openindices
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
\openin 1 texinfo.cnf
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
\closein 1
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\comment % Ignore the actual filename.
}
% Called from \setfilename.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\openindices{%
\newindex{cp}%
\newcodeindex{fn}%
\newcodeindex{vr}%
\newcodeindex{tp}%
\newcodeindex{ky}%
\newcodeindex{pg}%
}
% @bye.
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{pdf,}
% adobe `portable' document format
\newcount\tempnum
\newcount\lnkcount
\newtoks\filename
\newcount\filenamelength
\newcount\pgn
\newtoks\toksA
\newtoks\toksB
\newtoks\toksC
\newtoks\toksD
\newbox\boxA
\newcount\countA
\newif\ifpdf
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
\else
\ifx\pdfoutput\relax
\else
\ifcase\pdfoutput
\else
\pdftrue
\fi
\fi
\fi
%
\ifpdf
\input pdfcolor
\pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
\def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
\def\imagewidth{#2}%
\def\imageheight{#3}%
% without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
% included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
\immediate\pdfimage
\else
\immediate\pdfximage
\fi
\ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
\ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
\ifnum\pdftexversion<13
#1.pdf%
\else
{#1.pdf}%
\fi
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
\fi}
\def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
% We have to set dummies so commands such as @code in a section title
% aren't expanded.
\atdummies
\normalturnoffactive
\pdfdest name{#1} xyz%
}}
\def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
\let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light?
\def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
% come from Petr Olsak
\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
\advance\tempnum by 1
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
%
% #1 is the section text. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
% of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node
% text, which might be empty if this toc entry had no
% corresponding node. #4 is the page number.
%
\def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
% Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
% page number. We could generate a destination for the section
% text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
% seem worthwhile, since most documents are normally structured.
\def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
\ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}\fi
%
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{#1}%
}
%
\def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
\begingroup
% Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
\edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
\edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
%
% Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
\def\thischapnum{##2}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\thissecnum{0}%
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}%
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
\def\thissecnum{##2}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}%
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
}%
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\thischapnum{0}%
\def\thissecnum{0}%
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
% al. a second time, below.
\def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
\def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
\def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
\def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
\def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
\def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
\def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
\def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
\input \jobname.toc
%
% Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
% The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
% subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
%
% We use the node names as the destinations.
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
\dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
%
% PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
% document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
% since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
% Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
% Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
%
% xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
% their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right
% now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
\indexnofonts
\turnoffactive
\input \jobname.toc
\endgroup
}
%
\def\makelinks #1,{%
\def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
\ifx\params\E
\let\nextmakelinks=\relax
\else
\let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
\ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
\picknum{#1}%
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
\linkcolor #1%
\advance\lnkcount by 1%
\endlink
\fi
\nextmakelinks
}
\def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
\def\pn#1{%
\def\p{#1}%
\ifx\p\lbrace
\let\nextpn=\ppn
\else
\let\nextpn=\ppnn
\def\first{#1}
\fi
\nextpn
}
\def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
\def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
\def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
\ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
\advance\filenamelength by 1
\fi
\fi
\nextsp}
\def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
\let \startlink \pdfannotlink
\else
\let \startlink \pdfstartlink
\fi
\def\pdfurl#1{%
\begingroup
\normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
\makevalueexpandable
\leavevmode\Red
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
\endgroup}
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
\def\maketoks{%
\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
\ifx\first0\adn0
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
\else
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
\let\next=\maketoks
\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
\fi
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
\next}
\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
\def\pdflink#1{%
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
\linkcolor #1\endlink}
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
\else
\let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
\let\pdfurl = \gobble
\let\endlink = \relax
\let\linkcolor = \relax
\let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{fonts,}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
% italics, not bold italics.
%
\def\setfontstyle#1{%
\def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
\csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
}
% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
%
\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% So we set up a \sf.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newfam\sffam
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We don't need math for this font style.
\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Default leading.
\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
%
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
%
\def\setleading#1{%
\normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
\normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
\normalbaselines
\setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
\vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
\def\fontprefix{cm}
\fi
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
\def\rmshape{r}
\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
\def\bfshape{b}
\def\bxshape{bx}
\def\ttshape{tt}
\def\ttbshape{tt}
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
\def\itshape{ti}
\def\itbshape{bxti}
\def\slshape{sl}
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
\def\sfshape{ss}
\def\sfbshape{ss}
\def\scshape{csc}
\def\scbshape{csc}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
\font\smalli=cmmi9
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
\def\authorrm{\secrm}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\authortt{\sectt}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
\let\secbf\secrm
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
\font\reducedi=cmmi10
\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\def\resetmathfonts{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
\textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
\textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
%
% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
%
% This all needs generalizing, badly.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\textfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
\let\tenttsl=\textttsl
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\curfontsize{text}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\titlefonts{%
\let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
\let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
\let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
\let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\curfontsize{title}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
\def\chapfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
\let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
\def\curfontsize{chap}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
\def\secfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
\let\tenttsl=\secttsl
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\curfontsize{sec}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
\def\subsecfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
\let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\curfontsize{ssec}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
\def\reducedfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
\let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
\let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
\let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\curfontsize{reduced}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
\def\smallfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
\let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
\let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
\let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\curfontsize{small}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
\def\smallerfonts{%
\let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
\let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
\let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
\let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\curfontsize{smaller}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
\resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
% can fit this many characters:
% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
%
% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
%
% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
% --karl, 24jan03.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\textfonts \rm
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
% Fonts for short table of contents.
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} % no cmb12
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
\ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
% ttsl for book titles, do we?
\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\i=\smartitalic
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\slanted=\smartslanted
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\var=\smartslanted
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
\let\emph=\smartitalic
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @b, explicit bold.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
\let\strong=\b
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @sansserif, explicit sans.
\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
%
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
%
\catcode`@=11
\def\frenchspacing{%
\sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
\sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
}
\catcode`@=\other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\t#1{%
{\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
\null
}
\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
\font\keysy=cmsy9
\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
\vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
\hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
\kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
\kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
% The old definition, with no lozenge:
%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
\let\file=\samp
\let\option=\samp
% @code is a modification of @t,
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
\def\tclose#1{%
{%
% Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
\spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
%
% Switch to typewriter.
\tt
%
% But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
\def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
%
% Turn off hyphenation.
\nohyphenation
%
\rawbackslash
\frenchspacing
#1%
}%
\null
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
% -- rms.
{
\catcode`\-=\active
\catcode`\_=\active
%
\global\def\code{\begingroup
\catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
\catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
\codex
}
}
\def\realdash{-}
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\codeunder{%
% this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
% is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
% will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
% (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
\ifusingtt{\ifmmode
\mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
\else\normalunderscore \fi
\discretionary{}{}{}}%
{\_}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
% then @kbd has no effect.
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\arg{#1}%
\ifx\arg\worddistinct
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
\else\ifx\arg\wordexample
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
\else\ifx\arg\wordcode
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
\errhelp = \EMsimple
\errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi\fi\fi
}
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
\def\wordexample{example}
\def\wordcode{code}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Default is `distinct.'
\kbdinputstyle distinct
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\xkey{\key}
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
\let\indicateurl=\code
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\env=\code
\let\command=\code
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
% a hypertex \special here.
%
\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
\unsepspaces
\pdfurl{#1}%
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
\ifpdf
\unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
\else
\unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
\fi
\else
\code{#1}% only url given, so show it
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\endlink
\endgroup}
% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
%
\let\url=\uref
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifpdf
\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
\def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
\unsepspaces
\pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
\ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
\endlink
\endgroup}
\else
\let\email=\uref
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
%
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
%
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
% all-uppercase.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
{\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
\def\temp{#2}%
\ifx\temp\empty \else
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
\fi
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
%
\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
{\frenchspacing #1}%
\def\temp{#2}%
\ifx\temp\empty \else
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
\fi
}
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
%
% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
% font height.
%
% feymr - regular
% feymo - slanted
% feybr - bold
% feybo - bold slanted
%
% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
% Hmm.
%
% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
% Hope not.
%
%
\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
\def\eurofont{%
% We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
% \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
% installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
% font installed.
%
% There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
% that to the current nominal size.
%
% By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
% does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
%
\def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
%
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
% bold:
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
\else
% regular:
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
\fi
\thiseurofont
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
%
\def\registeredsymbol{%
$^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
\hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
}$%
}
% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
% so we'll define it if necessary.
%
\ifx\Orb\undefined
\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{page headings,}
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
\newif\ifseenauthor
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
\let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
\let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\envdef\titlepage{%
% Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
\begingroup
\parindent=0pt \textfonts
% Leave some space at the very top of the page.
\vglue\titlepagetopglue
% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
\finishedtitlepagetrue
%
% Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
% at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
\let\oldpage = \page
\def\page{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\finishtitlepage
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
\let\page = \oldpage
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\page
\null
}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
\def\Etitlepage{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
\finishtitlepage
\fi
% It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
% because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
% If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
\oldpage
\endgroup
%
% Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
% in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
\HEADINGSon
%
% If they want short, they certainly want long too.
\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
\shortcontents
\contents
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
\global\let\contents = \relax
\fi
%
\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
\contents
\global\let\contents = \relax
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
\def\finishtitlepage{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
\vskip\titlepagebottomglue
\finishedtitlepagetrue
}
%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
\let\tt=\authortt}
\parseargdef\title{%
\checkenv\titlepage
\leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
% print a rule at the page bottom also.
\finishedtitlepagefalse
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
}
\parseargdef\subtitle{%
\checkenv\titlepage
{\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
}
% @author should come last, but may come many times.
% It can also be used inside @quotation.
%
\parseargdef\author{%
\def\temp{\quotation}%
\ifx\thisenv\temp
\def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
\else
\checkenv\titlepage
\ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
{\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%%% Set up page headings and footings.
\let\thispage=\folio
\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Now make TeX use those variables
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
\else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
\else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
% Commands to set those variables.
% For example, this is what @headings on does
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
%
% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
% @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
\global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
\global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
% @headings off turns them off.
% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\HEADINGSoff{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
\HEADINGSoff
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
% edge of all pages.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\global\pageno=1
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
}
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
% page number on top right.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\global\pageno=1
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
}
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
}
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
}
% Subroutines used in generating headings
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
\ifx\today\undefined
\def\today{%
\number\day\space
\ifcase\month
\or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
\or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
\or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
\fi
\space\number\year}
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
% It generates no output of its own.
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{tables,}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% default indentation of table text
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
\newdimen\itemmax
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% these defs.
% They also define \itemindex
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
\advance\hsize by -\tableindent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\itemindex{#1}%
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
%
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
% command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
% horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
\ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
%
% Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
% but leave it ragged-right.
\begingroup
\advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
\advance\hsize by\tableindent
\advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
\leavevmode\unhbox0\par
\endgroup
%
% We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
\nobreak \vskip-\parskip
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
% what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
% \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
% cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
% bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
% \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\penalty 10001
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\endgroup
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
\else
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\noindent
% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
% eventually be printed.
\nobreak\kern-\tableindent
\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
\unhbox0
\nobreak\kern\dimen0
\endgroup
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
\fi
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\envdef\table{%
\let\itemindex\gobble
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\tablecheck{table}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\envdef\ftable{%
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\tablecheck{ftable}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\envdef\vtable{%
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\tablecheck{vtable}%
}
\def\tablecheck#1{%
\ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
\endgroup
\errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
\def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
\else
\let\next\tablex
\fi
\next
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
\def\tablex#1{%
\def\itemindicate{#1}%
\parsearg\tabley
}
\def\tabley#1{%
{%
\makevalueexpandable
\edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
\expandafter
}\temp \endtablez
}
\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
\aboveenvbreak
\ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
\ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
\itemmax=\tableindent
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
\advance \leftskip by \tableindent
\exdentamount=\tableindent
\parindent = 0pt
\parskip = \smallskipamount
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
\let\item = \internalBitem
\let\itemx = \internalBitemx
}
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
\let\Eftable\Etable
\let\Evtable\Etable
\let\Eitemize\Etable
\let\Eenumerate\Etable
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
\newcount \itemno
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\doitemize#1{%
\aboveenvbreak
\itemmax=\itemindent
\advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
\exdentamount=\itemindent
\parindent=0pt
\parskip=\smallskipamount
\ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
\def\itemcontents{#1}%
% @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
\ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
\let\item=\itemizeitem
}
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
%
\def\itemizeitem{%
\advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
{%
% If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
% \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
% done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
% parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
% other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
% usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
% space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
% that's the theory.
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
\noindent
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
\flushcr
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
%
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
% argument is the same as `1'.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
\def\thearg{#1}%
\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
%
% Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
% letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
% (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
% This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
% all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
\expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
\ifx\rest\empty
% Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
% A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
% An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
% not equal to itself.
% Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
%
% We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
% continuing to look for a <number>.
%
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
\numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
\else
% It's a letter.
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
\lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
\else
\uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
\fi
\fi
\else
% Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
\numericenumerate
\fi
}
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
% given in \thearg.
%
\def\numericenumerate{%
\itemno = \thearg
\startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
}
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
\startenumeration{%
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
\ifnum\itemno=0
\errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
alphabet}%
\fi
\char\lccode\itemno
}%
}
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
\startenumeration{%
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
\ifnum\itemno=0
\errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
alphabet}
\fi
\char\uccode\itemno
}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
%
\def\startenumeration#1{%
\advance\itemno by -1
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
% to @enumerate.
%
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
% @multitable macros
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
%
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
% To make preamble:
%
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
% @item ...
%
% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
% columns as desired.
% Or use a template:
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
% @item ...
% using the widest term desired in each column.
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
% if they are.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Sample multitable:
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
% @item
% first col stuff
% @tab
% second col stuff
% @tab
% third col
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
%
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
% @end multitable
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
% to baseline.
% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
%
\newskip\multitableparskip
\newskip\multitableparindent
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
\newskip\multitablelinespace
\multitableparskip=0pt
\multitableparindent=6pt
\multitablecolspace=12pt
\multitablelinespace=0pt
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\endsetuptable\relax
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
\let\columnfractions\relax
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
\newif\ifsetpercent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
%
\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\global\advance\colcount by 1
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setuptable
}
\newcount\colcount
\def\setuptable#1{%
\def\firstarg{#1}%
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
\let\go = \relax
\else
\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
\global\setpercenttrue
\else
\ifsetpercent
\let\go\pickupwholefraction
\else
\global\advance\colcount by 1
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
% separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
\fi
\fi
\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
% we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
\else
\let\go = \setuptable
\fi%
\fi
\go
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% multitable-only commands.
%
% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
%
% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
%
\envdef\multitable{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\vskip\parskip
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\startsavinginserts
%
% @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
% contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
% \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
\def\item{\crcr}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\tolerance=9500
\hbadness=9500
\setmultitablespacing
\parskip=\multitableparskip
\parindent=\multitableparindent
\overfullrule=0pt
\global\colcount=0
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\everycr = {%
\noalign{%
\global\everytab={}%
\global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
% Check for saved footnotes, etc.
\checkinserts
% Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
%\filbreak
% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
}%
}%
%
\parsearg\domultitable
}
\def\domultitable#1{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
%
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
% be used as many times as user calls for columns.
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
% continue for many paragraphs if desired.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\halign\bgroup &%
\global\advance\colcount by 1
\multistrut
\vtop{%
% Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
%
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
% the first one.
%
% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
% to the width of each template entry.
%
% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
% left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
%
% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
\rightskip=0pt
\ifnum\colcount=1
% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
\advance\hsize by\leftskip
\else
\ifsetpercent \else
% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
\fi
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
\leftskip=\multitablecolspace
\fi
% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
% For example:
% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
% @item @code{#}
% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
% marking characters.
\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
}\cr
}
\def\Emultitable{%
\crcr
\egroup % end the \halign
\global\setpercentfalse
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\setmultitablespacing{%
\def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
%
% Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
% \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
% this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
% See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
%% table. If not, do nothing.
%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
%% than skip between lines in the table.
\fi%
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
%% than skip between lines in the table.
\fi}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{conditionals,}
% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
% attempt to close an environment group.
%
\def\makecond#1{%
\expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
\expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
}
\makecond{iftex}
\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
\makecond{ifnothtml}
\makecond{ifnotinfo}
\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
\makecond{ifnotxml}
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
%
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
%
% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
\newcount\doignorecount
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
% Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
\catcode`\@ = \other
\catcode`\{ = \other
\catcode`\} = \other
%
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
\spaceisspace
%
% Count number of #1's that we've seen.
\doignorecount = 0
%
% Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\dodoignore{#1}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
\obeylines %
%
\gdef\dodoignore#1{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Define a command to find the next `@end #1', which must be on a line
% by itself.
\long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
% And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
% line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
% example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
\long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
%
% And now expand that command.
\obeylines %
\doignoretext ^^M%
}%
}
\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
\let\next\doignoretextzzz
\else % Found a nested condition, ...
\advance\doignorecount by 1
\let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
% If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
\fi
\next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
}
% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
%
\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
\ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
\let\next\enddoignore
\else % Still inside a nested condition.
\advance\doignorecount by -1
\let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
\fi
\next
}
% Finish off ignored text.
\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
%
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
% didn't need it.
% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
%
\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
{%
\makevalueexpandable
\def\temp{#2}%
\edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
\ifx\temp\empty
\next{}%
\else
\setzzz#2\endsetzzz
\fi
}%
}
% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
%
\parseargdef\clear{%
{%
\makevalueexpandable
\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
}%
}
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
{
\catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
%
\gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
\let\value = \expandablevalue
% We don't want these characters active, ...
\catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
% ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
% So \let them to their normal equivalents.
\let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
}
}
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
%
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
{[No value for ``#1'']}%
\message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
\else
\csname SET#1\endcsname
\fi
}
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
% with @set.
%
% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
%
\makecond{ifset}
\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
\def\doifset#1#2{%
{%
\makevalueexpandable
\let\next=\empty
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
#1% If not set, redefine \next.
\fi
\expandafter
}\next
}
\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
%
% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
%
\makecond{ifclear}
\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
\let\dircategory=\comment
% @defininfoenclose.
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{indexing,}
% Index generation facilities
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
% for the sake of vms.
%
\def\newindex#1{%
\iflinks
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
\fi
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
\noexpand\doindex{#1}}
}
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
\iflinks
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
\fi
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
% inside @code.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
% #3 the target index (bar).
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
% Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
% closing the target index.
\expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
\expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
\expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
\fi
% redefine \fooindfile:
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
\expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
% redefine \fooindex:
\expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\indexdummies{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
\def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
\let\{ = \mylbrace
\let\} = \myrbrace
%
% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus
% effectively preventing its expansion. This is used only for control
% words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect
% for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
% from whatever follows.
%
% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
% space.
%
% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
%
\def\definedummyword##1{%
\expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}%
}%
\def\definedummyletter##1{%
\expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
}%
\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
%
% Do the redefinitions.
\commondummies
}
% For the aux file, @ is the escape character. So we want to redefine
% everything using @ instead of \realbackslash. When everything uses
% @, this will be simpler.
%
\def\atdummies{%
\def\@{@@}%
\def\ {@ }%
\let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
\let\} = \rbraceatcmd
%
% (See comments in \indexdummies.)
\def\definedummyword##1{%
\expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
}%
\def\definedummyletter##1{%
\expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
}%
\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
%
% Do the redefinitions.
\commondummies
}
% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. \definedummyword and
% \definedummyletter must be defined first.
%
\def\commondummies{%
%
\normalturnoffactive
%
\commondummiesnofonts
%
\definedummyletter{_}%
%
% Non-English letters.
\definedummyword{AA}%
\definedummyword{AE}%
\definedummyword{L}%
\definedummyword{OE}%
\definedummyword{O}%
\definedummyword{aa}%
\definedummyword{ae}%
\definedummyword{l}%
\definedummyword{oe}%
\definedummyword{o}%
\definedummyword{ss}%
\definedummyword{exclamdown}%
\definedummyword{questiondown}%
\definedummyword{ordf}%
\definedummyword{ordm}%
%
% Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
\definedummyword{bf}%
\definedummyword{gtr}%
\definedummyword{hat}%
\definedummyword{less}%
\definedummyword{sf}%
\definedummyword{sl}%
\definedummyword{tclose}%
\definedummyword{tt}%
%
\definedummyword{LaTeX}%
\definedummyword{TeX}%
%
% Assorted special characters.
\definedummyword{bullet}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\definedummyword{comma}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\definedummyword{copyright}%
\definedummyword{registeredsymbol}%
\definedummyword{dots}%
\definedummyword{enddots}%
\definedummyword{equiv}%
\definedummyword{error}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\definedummyword{euro}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\definedummyword{expansion}%
\definedummyword{minus}%
\definedummyword{pounds}%
\definedummyword{point}%
\definedummyword{print}%
\definedummyword{result}%
%
% Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
\makevalueexpandable
%
% Normal spaces, not active ones.
\unsepspaces
%
% No macro expansion.
\turnoffmacros
}
% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
%
% Better have this without active chars.
{
\catcode`\~=\other
\gdef\commondummiesnofonts{%
% Control letters and accents.
\definedummyletter{!}%
\definedummyaccent{"}%
\definedummyaccent{'}%
\definedummyletter{*}%
\definedummyaccent{,}%
\definedummyletter{.}%
\definedummyletter{/}%
\definedummyletter{:}%
\definedummyaccent{=}%
\definedummyletter{?}%
\definedummyaccent{^}%
\definedummyaccent{`}%
\definedummyaccent{~}%
\definedummyword{u}%
\definedummyword{v}%
\definedummyword{H}%
\definedummyword{dotaccent}%
\definedummyword{ringaccent}%
\definedummyword{tieaccent}%
\definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
\definedummyword{udotaccent}%
\definedummyword{dotless}%
%
% Texinfo font commands.
\definedummyword{b}%
\definedummyword{i}%
\definedummyword{r}%
\definedummyword{sc}%
\definedummyword{t}%
%
% Commands that take arguments.
\definedummyword{acronym}%
\definedummyword{cite}%
\definedummyword{code}%
\definedummyword{command}%
\definedummyword{dfn}%
\definedummyword{emph}%
\definedummyword{env}%
\definedummyword{file}%
\definedummyword{kbd}%
\definedummyword{key}%
\definedummyword{math}%
\definedummyword{option}%
\definedummyword{samp}%
\definedummyword{strong}%
\definedummyword{tie}%
\definedummyword{uref}%
\definedummyword{url}%
\definedummyword{var}%
\definedummyword{verb}%
\definedummyword{w}%
}
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\indexnofonts{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Accent commands should become @asis.
\def\definedummyaccent##1{%
\expandafter\let\csname ##1\endcsname\asis
}%
% We can just ignore other control letters.
\def\definedummyletter##1{%
\expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{}%
}%
% Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
\let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
%
\commondummiesnofonts
%
% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
%\let\tt=\asis
%
\def\ { }%
\def\@{@}%
% how to handle braces?
\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
%
% Non-English letters.
\def\AA{AA}%
\def\AE{AE}%
\def\L{L}%
\def\OE{OE}%
\def\O{O}%
\def\aa{aa}%
\def\ae{ae}%
\def\l{l}%
\def\oe{oe}%
\def\o{o}%
\def\ss{ss}%
\def\exclamdown{!}%
\def\questiondown{?}%
\def\ordf{a}%
\def\ordm{o}%
%
\def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
\def\TeX{TeX}%
%
% Assorted special characters.
% (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
\def\bullet{bullet}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\comma{,}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\copyright{copyright}%
\def\registeredsymbol{R}%
\def\dots{...}%
\def\enddots{...}%
\def\equiv{==}%
\def\error{error}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\euro{euro}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\expansion{==>}%
\def\minus{-}%
\def\pounds{pounds}%
\def\point{.}%
\def\print{-|}%
\def\result{=>}%
%
% Don't write macro names.
\emptyusermacros
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\iflinks
{%
% Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
\toks0 = {#2}%
% If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
\def\thirdarg{#3}%
\ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
\toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
\fi
%
\edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
%
\ifvmode
\dosubindsanitize
\else
\dosubindwrite
\fi
}%
\fi
}
% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
%
\def\dosubindwrite{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Remember, we are within a group.
\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
\escapechar=`\\
\def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
%
% Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
% get the string to sort by.
{\indexnofonts
\edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
\xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
}%
%
% Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
% the original text, including any font commands. We write
% three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
% subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
% sorted result.
\edef\temp{%
\write\writeto{%
\string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\temp
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Take care of unwanted page breaks:
%
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
% \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
% like this:
% @end defun
% @tindex whatever
% @defun ...
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
% the previous defun.
%
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
%
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
%
% But wait, there is a catch there:
% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
% representation of the skip.
%
% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
%
\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
%
% ..., ready, GO:
%
\def\dosubindsanitize{%
% \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
\skip0 = \lastskip
\edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
\count255 = \lastpenalty
%
% If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
% skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
% -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
% non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
% breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
\else
\vskip-\skip0
\fi
%
\dosubindwrite
%
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
% perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
% to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
% signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
% following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @deffn deffn-whatever
% @vindex index-whatever
% Description.
% would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
% and the "Description." paragraph.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
% On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
% this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
% (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
\nobreak\vskip\skip0
\fi
}
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
% or
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
% containing these kinds of lines:
% \initial {c}
% before the first topic whose initial is c
% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
% for a topic that is used without subtopics
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \primary {topic}
% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
% for each subtopic.
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
\def\findex {\fnindex}
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
{\obeylines %
\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\smallfonts \rm
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\tolerance = 9500
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
% Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
% \initial {@}
% as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
% (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
\catcode`\@ = 11
\openin 1 \jobname.#1s
\ifeof 1
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
% there is some text.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\putwordIndexNonexistent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
%
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
% it can discover if there is anything in it.
\read 1 to \temp
\ifeof 1
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\putwordIndexIsEmpty
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
% Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
% character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
% to make right now.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\\ = 0
\escapechar = `\\
\begindoublecolumns
\input \jobname.#1s
\enddoublecolumns
\fi
\fi
\closein 1
\endgroup}
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
\def\initial#1{{%
% Some minor font changes for the special characters.
\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
%
% Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
\removelastskip
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\nobreak
\vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
\penalty 0
\vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
% to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
% we need before each entry, but it's better.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
\leftline{\secbf #1}%
% Do our best not to break after the initial.
\nobreak
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
% \def\entry#1#2{...
% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
%
% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
% --kasal, 21nov03
\def\entry{%
\begingroup
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
% affect previous text.
\par
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Do not fill out the last line with white space.
\parfillskip = 0in
%
% No extra space above this paragraph.
\parskip = 0in
%
% Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
\finalhyphendemerits = 0
%
% \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
% don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
% dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
% indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
% lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
%
% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
\hangindent = 2em
%
% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
% with blank space.
\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
%
% A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
% columns.
\vskip 0pt plus1pt
%
% Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
\afterassignment\doentry
\let\temp =
}
\def\doentry{%
\bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
\noindent
\aftergroup\finishentry
% And now comes the text of the entry.
}
\def\finishentry#1{%
% #1 is the page number.
%
% The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
% there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
% cursed by a Unix daemon.
\def\tempa{{\rm }}%
\def\tempb{#1}%
\edef\tempc{\tempa}%
\edef\tempd{\tempb}%
\ifx\tempc\tempd
\ %
\else
%
% If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
% this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
% fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
\hfil\penalty50
\null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
%
% The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
% part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
% \hbox ensues.
\ifpdf
\pdfgettoks#1.%
\ \the\toksA
\else
\ #1%
\fi
\fi
\par
\endgroup
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
\hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\secondary#1#2{{%
\parfillskip=0in
\parskip=0in
\hangindent=1in
\hangafter=1
\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
\ifpdf
\pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
\else
#2
\fi
\par
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}}
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
\catcode`\@=11
\newbox\partialpage
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
% Grab any single-column material above us.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\output = {%
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
% whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
% routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
% essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
% output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
% runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
\ifvoid\partialpage \else
\onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
% Unvbox the main output page.
\unvbox\PAGE
\kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
}%
}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
%
% Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
\output = {\doublecolumnout}%
%
% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
% execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
%
% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
% as it did when we hard-coded it.
%
% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
% been clobbered.
%
\doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
\advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
\divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
%
% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
% since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
\vsize = 2\vsize
}
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
% the last.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\doublecolumnout{%
\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
% Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
% (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
% previous page.
\dimen@ = \vsize
\divide\dimen@ by 2
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
\setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
\onepageout\pagesofar
\unvbox255
\penalty\outputpenalty
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\pagesofar{%
\unvbox\partialpage
%
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
\hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% All done with double columns.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
\output = {%
% Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
% current page, no automatic page break.
\balancecolumns
%
% If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
% though, there will be another page break right after this \output
% invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
% want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
% definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
% called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
% the output somewhat more palatable.)
\global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
}%
\eject
\endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
%
% \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
% the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
% typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
% \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
\pagegoal = \vsize
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Called at the end of the double column material.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\balancecolumns{%
\setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
\dimen@ = \ht0
\advance\dimen@ by \topskip
\advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
\divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
%debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
\splittopskip = \topskip
% Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
{%
\vbadness = 10000
\loop
\global\setbox3 = \copy0
\global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
\ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
\global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
\repeat
}%
%debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
%
\pagesofar
}
\catcode`\@ = \other
\message{sectioning,}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Chapters, sections, etc.
% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered
% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newcount\chapno
\newcount\secno \secno=0
\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
%
\def\appendixletter{%
\ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
% The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
% expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
% expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
% with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
\else\char\the\appendixno
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\thischapter{}
\def\thissection{}
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% we only have subsub.
\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
%
% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
%
% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
\def\chapheadtype{N}
% Choose a heading macro
% #1 is heading type
% #2 is heading level
% #3 is text for heading
\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
% Compute the abs. sec. level:
\absseclevel=#2
\advance\absseclevel by \secbase
% Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
\ifnum \absseclevel < 0
\absseclevel = 0
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifnum \absseclevel > 3
\absseclevel = 3
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% The heading type:
\def\headtype{#1}%
\if \headtype U%
\ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
\chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Check for appendix sections:
\ifnum \absseclevel = 0
\edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
\else
\if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
\fi\fi
\fi
% Check for numbered within unnumbered:
\ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
\def\headtype{U}%
\else
\chardef\unmlevel = 3
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Now print the heading:
\if \headtype U%
\ifcase\absseclevel
\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
\or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
\or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
\or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\if \headtype A%
\ifcase\absseclevel
\appendixzzz{#3}%
\or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
\or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
\or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
\fi
\else
\ifcase\absseclevel
\chapterzzz{#3}%
\or \seczzz{#3}%
\or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
\or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
\fi
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\suppressfirstparagraphindent
}
% an interface:
\def\numhead{\genhead N}
\def\apphead{\genhead A}
\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
%
% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
%
\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
\def\chapterzzz#1{%
% section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
% as an @include file.
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
\global\advance\chapno by 1
%
% Used for \float.
\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
\resetallfloatnos
%
\message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
%
% Write the actual heading.
\chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
%
% So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
\global\let\section = \numberedsec
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
}
\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
\def\appendixzzz#1{%
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
\global\advance\appendixno by 1
\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
\resetallfloatnos
%
\def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
\message{\appendixnum}%
%
\chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
%
\global\let\section = \appendixsec
\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
\global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
%
% Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
\global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
\resetallfloatnos
%
% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
% to be executed, not expanded).
%
% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
% the toc entries.)
\toks0 = {#1}%
\message{(\the\toks0)}%
%
\chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
%
\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
% Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
% an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
% Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
\unnmhead0{#1}%
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @top is like @unnumbered.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\top\unnumbered
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Sections.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
\def\seczzz#1{%
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
}
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
}
\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
% Subsections.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
}
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
}
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
% Subsubsections.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
}
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
}
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% These macros control what the section commands do, according
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\section = \numberedsec
\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
% overlong headings to fold.
% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\majorheading{%
{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
\parsearg\chapheadingzzz
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
\parindent=0pt\raggedright
\rm #1\hfill}}%
\bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
\suppressfirstparagraphindent
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
\newskip\chapheadingskip
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
\def\CHAPPAGon{%
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
\CHAPPAGon
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Chapter opening.
%
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
%
% To test against our argument.
\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
%
\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\pchapsepmacro
{%
\chapfonts \rm
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
% xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
% after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
%
% Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
% number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
\def\temptype{#2}%
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
\def\toctype{unnchap}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\gdef\thischapter{#1}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
\setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
\def\toctype{omit}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\gdef\thischapter{}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
\def\toctype{app}%
% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
% because we don't want its macros evaluated now. And we don't
% use \thissection because that changes with each section.
%
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
\noexpand\thischaptername}%
\else
\setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
\def\toctype{numchap}%
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
\noexpand\thischaptername}%
\fi\fi\fi
%
% Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
% \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
% entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
\writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
%
% For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
% the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
% been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
% text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
% being visible, for instance under high magnification.
\donoderef{#2}%
%
% Typeset the actual heading.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\unhbox0 #1\par}%
}%
\nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
\nobreak
}
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\centerparameters{%
\advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
\leftskip = \rightskip
\parfillskip = 0pt
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
%
\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\unnchfopen #1{%
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
\parindent=0pt\raggedright
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
}
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
\par\penalty 5000 %
}
\def\centerchfopen #1{%
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
\parindent=0pt
\hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\CHAPFopen{%
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newskip\secheadingskip
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Subsection titles.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newskip\subsecheadingskip
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Subsubsection titles.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Print any size, any type, section title.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
% section number.
%
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
{%
% Switch to the right set of fonts.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
%
% Insert space above the heading.
\csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
%
% Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
\def\sectionlevel{#2}%
\def\temptype{#3}%
%
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
\def\toctype{unn}%
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
% for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
% and don't redefine \thissection.
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
\def\toctype{omit}%
\let\sectionlevel=\empty
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
\def\toctype{app}%
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
\else
\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
\def\toctype{num}%
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
\fi\fi\fi
%
% Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chfplain.
\writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
% Again, see comments in \chfplain.
\donoderef{#3}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Output the actual section heading.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
\unhbox0 #1}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
% Don't allow stretch, though.
\kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
%
% Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
% was followed by glue.
\nobreak
%
% We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
% glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
% discardable item.)
\vskip-\parskip
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
% 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
% section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @section sec-whatever
% @deffn def-whatever
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\penalty 10001
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
\message{toc,}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Table of contents.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newwrite\tocfile
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Called from @chapter, etc.
%
% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
% destination to jump to.
%
% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newif\iftocfileopened
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
%
\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
\edef\writetoctype{#1}%
\ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
\iftocfileopened\else
\immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
\global\tocfileopenedtrue
\fi
%
\iflinks
\toks0 = {#2}%
\toks2 = \expandafter{\lastnode}%
\edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}{#3}%
{\the\toks2}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
\temp
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
% writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
% just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
% 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
% two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
% `1', and two named `2'.
\ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
\newcount\savepageno
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\startcontents#1{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
% start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
% \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
% From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
\contentsalignmacro
\immediate\closeout\tocfile
%
% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
% It is abundantly clear what they are.
\def\thischapter{}%
\chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
%
\savepageno = \pageno
\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
\catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
% We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
% title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
%\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
\advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
%
% Roman numerals for page numbers.
\ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
% Normal (long) toc.
\def\contents{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
\openin 1 \jobname.toc
\ifeof 1 \else
\input \jobname.toc
\fi
\vfill \eject
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
\ifeof 1 \else
\pdfmakeoutlines
\fi
\closein 1
\endgroup
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
\global\pageno = \savepageno
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
% And just the chapters.
\def\summarycontents{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
%
\let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
\let\appentry = \shortchapentry
\let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
% We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
\secfonts
\let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
\let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
\rm
\hyphenpenalty = 10000
\advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
\let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
\openin 1 \jobname.toc
\ifeof 1 \else
\input \jobname.toc
\fi
\closein 1
\vfill \eject
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
\endgroup
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
\global\pageno = \savepageno
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
%
\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
% This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
% widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
% But use \hss just in case.
% (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
% the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
%
% We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
% with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
% left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
% chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
% there are before deciding ...
\hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
% The last argument is the page number.
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Chapters, in the main contents.
\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
%
% Chapters, in the short toc.
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
\tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Appendices, in the main contents.
% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
%
\def\appendixbox#1{%
% We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
\hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
%
\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Unnumbered chapters.
\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Sections.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Subsections.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% And subsubsections.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Same as \defaultparindent.
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
% page number.
%
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
\penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
\begingroup
\chapentryfonts
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\endgroup
\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
}
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
\secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\endgroup}
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
\subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\endgroup}
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
\subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\endgroup}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
\let\tocentry = \entry
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{environments,}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @foo ... @end foo.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\point{$\star$}
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% The @error{} command.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\newbox\errorbox
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\vbox{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\hrule height\dimen2
\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
\kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
\hrule height\dimen2}
\hfil}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\envdef\tex{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode `\%=14
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode `\+=\other
\catcode `\"=\other
\catcode `\|=\other
\catcode `\<=\other
\catcode `\>=\other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\escapechar=`\\
%
\let\b=\ptexb
\let\bullet=\ptexbullet
\let\c=\ptexc
\let\,=\ptexcomma
\let\.=\ptexdot
\let\dots=\ptexdots
\let\equiv=\ptexequiv
\let\!=\ptexexclam
\let\i=\ptexi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\indent=\ptexindent
\let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\{=\ptexlbrace
\let\+=\tabalign
\let\}=\ptexrbrace
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\/=\ptexslash
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\*=\ptexstar
\let\t=\ptext
%
\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
\def\@{@}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
% There is no need to define \Etex.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
% have any width.
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
% This space is always present above and below environments.
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
% \sectionheading, q.v.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
\endgraf
\ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
\removelastskip
% it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
% or better ...
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
\vskip\envskipamount
\fi
\fi
}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
\let\nonarrowing=\relax
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
% environment contents.
\font\circle=lcircle10
\newdimen\circthick
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
%
\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
\ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
\hskip\rskip}}
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
\cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
\hskip\rskip}}
%
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\envdef\cartouche{%
\ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
\startsavinginserts
\lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
\leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
\advance\cartinner by-\rskip
\cartouter=\hsize
\advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
% side, and for 6pt waste from
% each corner char, and rule thickness
\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
% Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
\let\nonarrowing=\comment
\vbox\bgroup
\baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
\carttop
\hbox\bgroup
\hskip\lskip
\vrule\kern3pt
\vbox\bgroup
\kern3pt
\hsize=\cartinner
\baselineskip=\normbskip
\lineskip=\normlskip
\parskip=\normpskip
\vskip -\parskip
\comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\Ecartouche{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifhmode\par\fi
\kern3pt
\egroup
\kern3pt\vrule
\hskip\rskip
\egroup
\cartbot
\egroup
\checkinserts
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
% inside a group.
\def\nonfillstart{%
\aboveenvbreak
\hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
\sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
\let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
\obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
\parskip = 0pt
\parindent = 0pt
\emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
% at next level down.
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
\advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
\exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\exdent=\nofillexdent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
% This affects the following displayed environments:
% @example, @display, @format, @lisp
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\smallword{small}
\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
\def\setnormaldispenv{%
\ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
\smallexamplefonts \rm
\fi
}
\def\setsmalldispenv{%
\ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
\else
\smallexamplefonts \rm
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
% Let's do it by one command:
\def\makedispenv #1#2{
\expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
\expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
\expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Define two synonyms:
\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
\makedispenv{#1}{#3}
\makedispenv{#2}{#3}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
%
% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\nonfillstart
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\tt
\let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
\gobble % eat return
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\makedispenv {display}{%
\nonfillstart
\gobble
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\makedispenv{format}{%
\let\nonarrowing = t%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\nonfillstart
\gobble
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
\envdef\flushleft{%
\let\nonarrowing = t%
\nonfillstart
\gobble
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @flushright.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\envdef\flushright{%
\let\nonarrowing = t%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\nonfillstart
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
\gobble
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\envdef\quotation{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
{\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
\parindent=0pt
%
% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
\advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
\advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
\exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
\let\nonarrowing = \relax
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parsearg\quotationlabel
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
% doing normal filling.
%
\def\Equotation{%
\par
\ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
% indent a bit.
\leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
\fi
{\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
\def\quotationlabel#1{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\ifx\temp\empty \else
{\bf #1: }%
\fi
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
%
% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
%
% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
% verbatim line.
\def\dospecials{%
\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
\do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
\do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% [Knuth] p. 380
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
\def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
\begingroup
\catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
\endgroup
%
% Setup for the @verb command.
%
% Eight spaces for a tab
\begingroup
\catcode`\^^I=\active
\gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
\endgroup
%
\def\setupverb{%
\tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
\def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
\catcode`\`=\active
\tabeightspaces
% Respect line breaks,
% print special symbols as themselves, and
% make each space count
% must do in this order:
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
}
% Setup for the @verbatim environment
%
% Real tab expansion
\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
%
\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
\begingroup
\catcode`\^^I=\active
\gdef\tabexpand{%
\catcode`\^^I=\active
\def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
\dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
\divide\dimen0 by\tabw
\multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
\advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
\wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
}%
}
\endgroup
\def\setupverbatim{%
\nonfillstart
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
% Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
\tt
\def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
\catcode`\`=\active
\tabexpand
% Respect line breaks,
% print special symbols as themselves, and
% make each space count
% must do in this order:
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
\everypar{\starttabbox}%
}
% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
%
% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
%
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
\begingroup
\catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
\gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
\endgroup
%
\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
%
%
% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
%
% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
%
% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
%
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
%
\begingroup
\catcode`\ =\active
\obeylines %
% ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
% of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
% line in the output.
\xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
% We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
% without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
\endgroup
%
\envdef\verbatim{%
\setupverbatim\doverbatim
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
{%
\makevalueexpandable
\setupverbatim
\input #1
\afterenvbreak
}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @copying ... @end copying.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
% possible is very desirable.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
%
\def\insertcopying{%
\begingroup
\parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
\scanexp\copyingtext
\endgroup
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{defuns,}
% @defun etc.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Start the processing of @deffn:
\def\startdefun{%
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
\medbreak
\else
% If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
% which is there to keep the function description together with its
% header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
% by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
% commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
% a break between a section heading and a defun.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
%
% Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
% But do insert the glue.
\medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
\fi
%
\parindent=0in
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\dodefunx#1{%
% First, check whether we are in the right environment:
\checkenv#1%
%
% As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
% It's not a great place, though.
\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
%
% And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
\expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
%
\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
\begingroup
% call \deffnheader:
#1#2 \endheader
% common ending:
\interlinepenalty = 10000
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
\endgraf
\nobreak\vskip -\parskip
\penalty 10002 % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
% Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
% rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
\checkparencounts
\endgroup
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
%
\def\makedefun#1{%
\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
\edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
\makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
\temp
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
%
% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
%
\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
\envdef#1{%
\startdefun
\parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
}%
\def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
\def#3%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%%% Untyped functions:
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @deffn category name args
\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @deffn category class name args
\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \defopon {category on}class name args
\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
%
\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
% Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
\defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%%% Typed functions:
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @deftypefn category type name args
\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @deftypeop category class type name args
\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
%
\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%%% Typed variables:
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @deftypevr category type var args
\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @deftypecv category class type var args
\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
\dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
}
%%% Untyped variables:
% @defvr category var args
\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
% @defcv category class var args
\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
% \defcvof {category of}class var args
\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
%%% Type:
% @deftp category name args
\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
\doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
\defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
}
% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
% #2 is the return type, if any.
% #3 is the function name.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
%
\def\defname#1#2#3{%
% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
%
% How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
% distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
% just below it.
\def\temp{#1}%
\setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
%
% Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
% The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
% we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
\dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
% The continuations:
\dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
% (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
%
% Put the type name to the right margin.
\noindent
\hbox to 0pt{%
\hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
% \hsize has to be shortened this way:
\kern\leftskip
% Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
}%
%
% Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
{%
% defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
% . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
% . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
% common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
% tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
% . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
% . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
% one has made identifiers using them :).
\df \tt
\def\temp{#2}% return value type
\ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
#3% output function name
}%
{\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
%
\boldbrax
% arguments will be output next, if any.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\defunargs#1{%
% use sl by default (not ttsl),
% tt for the names.
\df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
%
% On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
% want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
\let\var=\ttslanted
#1%
\sl\hyphenchar\font=45
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
%
\def\activeparens{%
\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
\catcode`\&=\active
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
{
\activeparens
\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
\global\let& = \&
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
\gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newcount\parencount
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
\newif\ifampseen
\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
\def\parenfont{%
\ifampseen
% At the first level, print parens in roman,
% otherwise use the default font.
\ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
\else
% The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
% the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
\sf
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\infirstlevel#1{%
\ifampseen
\ifnum\parencount=1
#1%
\fi
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\opnr{%
\global\advance\parencount by 1
{\parenfont(}%
\infirstlevel \bfafterword
}
\def\clnr{%
{\parenfont)}%
\infirstlevel \sl
\global\advance\parencount by -1
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newcount\brackcount
\def\lbrb{%
\global\advance\brackcount by 1
{\bf[}%
}
\def\rbrb{%
{\bf]}%
\global\advance\brackcount by -1
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\checkparencounts{%
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
\ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
}
\def\badparencount{%
\errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
\global\parencount=0
}
\def\badbrackcount{%
\errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
\global\brackcount=0
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{macros,}
% @macro.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newwrite\macscribble
\def\scantokens#1{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\toks0={#1}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
\immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
\immediate\closeout\macscribble
\input \jobname.tmp
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\scanmacro#1{%
\begingroup
\newlinechar`\^^M
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
% backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
% \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
% with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% ... and \example
\spaceisspace
%
% Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
%
% I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
% --kasal, 29nov03
\scantokens{#1\endinput}%
\endgroup
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\scanexp#1{%
\edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
\temp
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
\newtoks\macname % Macro name
\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form
% \do\macro1\do\macro2...
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Utility routines.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\cslet#1#2{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\let
\csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
\csname#2\endcsname
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
{\catcode`\@=11
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
\def\unbrace#1{#1}
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
}
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
}
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\scanctxt{%
\catcode`\"=\other
\catcode`\+=\other
\catcode`\<=\other
\catcode`\>=\other
\catcode`\@=\other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\^=\other
\catcode`\_=\other
\catcode`\|=\other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\~=\other
}
\def\scanargctxt{%
\scanctxt
\catcode`\\=\other
\catcode`\^^M=\other
}
\def\macrobodyctxt{%
\scanctxt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\{=\other
\catcode`\}=\other
\catcode`\^^M=\other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\usembodybackslash
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\macroargctxt{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\scanctxt
\catcode`\\=\other
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% where N is the macro parameter number.
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
@gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
@gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
}
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
\def\macroxxx#1{%
\getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
\ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
\paramno=0%
\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
\expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
\else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
\global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
\global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
% Add the macroname to \macrolist
\toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
\xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
\begingroup \macrobodyctxt
\ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else \expandafter\parsemacbody
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parseargdef\unmacro{%
\if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
\global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
\global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
% Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
\begingroup
\expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
\let\do\unmacrodo
\xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
\endgroup
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
\fi
}
% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
%
\def\unmacrodo#1{%
\ifx#1\relax
% remove this
\else
\noexpand\do \noexpand #1%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
}
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
% it to # just before using the token list produced.
%
% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
% the macro is used.
\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
\let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
\if#1;\let\next=\relax
\else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
\advance\paramno by 1%
\expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
{\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
\edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
\fi\next}
% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
% Much magic with \expandafter here.
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
\def\defmacro{%
\let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
\ifrecursive
\ifcase\paramno
% 0
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
\or % 1
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\noexpand\braceorline
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
\else % many
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\expandafter
\expandafter\xdef
\expandafter\expandafter
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
\fi
\else
\ifcase\paramno
% 0
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
\or % 1
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\noexpand\braceorline
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
\egroup
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
\else % many
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\expandafter
\expandafter\xdef
\expandafter\expandafter
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
\paramlist{%
\egroup
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
\fi
\fi}
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
\def\braceorlinexxx{%
\ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\parsearg
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi \next}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We want to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
% expanded by \write.
\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
\edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
% For \indexnofonts, we need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the
% arguments (if present). Of course this is not nearly correct, but it
% is the best we can do for now. makeinfo does not expand macros in the
% argument to @deffn, which ends up writing an index entry, and texindex
% isn't prepared for an index sort entry that starts with \.
%
% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
% to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
%
\def\emptyusermacros{\begingroup
\def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\noexpand\asis}%
\edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
% @alias.
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
{%
\expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
\xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
}%
\next
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{cross references,}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newwrite\auxfile
\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
% @inforef is relatively simple.
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
% @node foo , bar , ...
% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
%
\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
%
% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\nwnode=\node
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\lastnode=\empty
% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
%
\def\donoderef#1{%
\ifx\lastnode\empty\else
\setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
\global\let\lastnode=\empty
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
}
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\newcount\savesfregister
%
\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
% anchor), which consists of three parts:
% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
% or the anchor name.
% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
% empty for anchors.
% 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
%
% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
%
\def\setref#1#2{%
\pdfmkdest{#1}%
\iflinks
{%
\atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
\turnoffactive
\otherbackslash
\edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
}%
\toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
\immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
\immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
}%
\fi
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
%
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\unsepspaces
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
\setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
\setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
% No printed node name was explicitly given.
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
% Use the node name inside the square brackets.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
% Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
% the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
% It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
\ifhavexrefs
% We know the real title if we have the xref values.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
% Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi%
\fi
\fi
\fi
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Make link in pdf output.
\ifpdf
\leavevmode
\getfilename{#4}%
{\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
\ifnum\filenamelength>0
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
\else
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}%
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\linkcolor
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
% instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
% LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
{%
% Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
% include an _ in the xref name, etc.
\indexnofonts
\turnoffactive
\otherbackslash
\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
\csname XR#1-title\endcsname
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\iffloat\Xthisreftitle
% If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
% print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
\ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
\refx{#1-snt}%
\else
\printedrefname
\fi
%
% if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
% "in MANUALNAME".
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
\space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
\fi
\else
% node/anchor (non-float) references.
%
% If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
% insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
% not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
% are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
% is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
% is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
\putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
\else
% _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
% control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
% into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
% printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
% printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
{\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
% Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
% @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
\ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
}%
% output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
\xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
%
% But we always want a comma and a space:
,\space
%
% output the `page 3'.
\turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
\fi
\fi
\endlink
\endgroup}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
% one that Bob is working on :).
%
\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Things referred to by \setref.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\Ynothing{}
\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
\def\Ynumbered{%
\ifnum\secno=0
\putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
\else
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
\fi\fi\fi
}
\def\Yappendix{%
\ifnum\secno=0
\putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
\else
\putwordSection@tie
@char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
\fi\fi\fi
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\refx#1#2{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
{%
\indexnofonts
\otherbackslash
\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
\csname XR#1\endcsname
}%
\ifx\thisrefX\relax
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% If not defined, say something at least.
\angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
\iflinks
\ifhavexrefs
\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
\else
\ifwarnedxrefs\else
\global\warnedxrefstrue
\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
\fi
\fi
\fi
\else
% It's defined, so just use it.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\thisrefX
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
#2% Output the suffix in any case.
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
%
\def\xrdef#1#2{%
\expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
%
% Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
\expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
% it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
\expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
%
% Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
\expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
\toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
\else
% had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
\toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
\fi
%
% Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
% for later use in \listoffloats.
\expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\def\tryauxfile{%
\openin 1 \jobname.aux
\ifeof 1 \else
\readauxfile
\global\havexrefstrue
\fi
\closein 1
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
\catcode`\^^@=\other
\catcode`\^^A=\other
\catcode`\^^B=\other
\catcode`\^^C=\other
\catcode`\^^D=\other
\catcode`\^^E=\other
\catcode`\^^F=\other
\catcode`\^^G=\other
\catcode`\^^H=\other
\catcode`\^^K=\other
\catcode`\^^L=\other
\catcode`\^^N=\other
\catcode`\^^P=\other
\catcode`\^^Q=\other
\catcode`\^^R=\other
\catcode`\^^S=\other
\catcode`\^^T=\other
\catcode`\^^U=\other
\catcode`\^^V=\other
\catcode`\^^W=\other
\catcode`\^^X=\other
\catcode`\^^Z=\other
\catcode`\^^[=\other
\catcode`\^^\=\other
\catcode`\^^]=\other
\catcode`\^^^=\other
\catcode`\^^_=\other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
% supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
% that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
% character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
% b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
% argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
% all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
%
% The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
% \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
% and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\^=\other
%
% Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\~=\other
\catcode`\[=\other
\catcode`\]=\other
\catcode`\"=\other
\catcode`\_=\other
\catcode`\|=\other
\catcode`\<=\other
\catcode`\>=\other
\catcode`\$=\other
\catcode`\#=\other
\catcode`\&=\other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\%=\other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
% characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
% leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
% character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
% of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
% should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
% now. --karl, 15jan04.
\catcode`\\=\other
%
% Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
{%
\count 1=128
\def\loop{%
\catcode\count 1=\other
\advance\count 1 by 1
\ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
}%
}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\{=1
\catcode`\}=2
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\@=0
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\input \jobname.aux
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\endgroup}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{insertions,}
% including footnotes.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newcount \footnoteno
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
\let\footnotestyle=\comment
{\catcode `\@=11
%
% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
\gdef\footnote{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\let\indent=\ptexindent
\let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
\edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
%
% In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
% extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
\let\@sf\empty
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
\unskip
\thisfootno\@sf
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\dofootnote
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}%
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\gdef\dofootnote{%
\insert\footins\bgroup
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
% So reset some parameters.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\hsize=\pagewidth
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
\splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
\splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
\floatingpenalty\@MM
\leftskip\z@skip
\rightskip\z@skip
\spaceskip\z@skip
\xspaceskip\z@skip
\parindent\defaultparindent
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\smallfonts \rm
%
% Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
% to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
% hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
% text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
\let\noindent = \relax
%
% Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
% footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
\everypar = {\hang}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\textindent{\thisfootno}%
%
% Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
\footstrut
\futurelet\next\fo@t
}
}%end \catcode `\@=11
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
% would be lost.
% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
% out prematurely.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\startsavinginserts{%
\ifx \insert\ptexinsert
\let\insert\saveinsert
\else
\let\checkinserts\relax
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\saveinsert#1{%
\edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
\afterassignment\next
% swallow the left brace
\let\temp =
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
\def\placesaveins#1{%
\ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
{\box#1}%
}
% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
{
\def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
\gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
}
% initialization:
\def\newsaveins #1{%
\edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
\next
}
\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
\csname newbox\endcsname #1%
\expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
\checksaveins #1}%
}
% initialize:
\let\checkinserts\empty
\newsaveins\footins
\newsaveins\margin
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
% undone and the next image would fail.
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
\ifeof 1 \else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
% doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
\input epsf.tex
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\closein 1
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\def\image#1{%
\ifx\epsfbox\undefined
\ifwarnednoepsf \else
\errhelp = \noepsfhelp
\errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
\global\warnednoepsftrue
\fi
\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
}
%
% Arguments to @image:
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
\newif\ifimagevmode
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
\catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
\normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% If the image is by itself, center it.
\ifvmode
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\imagevmodetrue
\nobreak\bigskip
% Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
% \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
% above and below.
\nobreak\vskip\parskip
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\nobreak
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\line\bgroup\hss
\fi
%
% Output the image.
\ifpdf
\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\epsfbox{#1.eps}%
\fi
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image
\endgroup}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
%
% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
% be referable.
%
% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
%
% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
% chapter-level command.
\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
%
\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
\let\thiscaption=\empty
\let\thisshortcaption=\empty
%
% don't lose footnotes inside @float.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
% insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\startsavinginserts
%
% We can't be used inside a paragraph.
\par
%
\vtop\bgroup
\def\floattype{#1}%
\def\floatlabel{#2}%
\def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
%
\ifx\floattype\empty
\let\safefloattype=\empty
\else
{%
% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
\indexnofonts
\turnoffactive
\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
}%
\fi
%
% If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
% We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
% Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
%
\expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
\global\advance\floatno by 1
%
{%
% This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
% XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
% labels (which have a completely different output format) from
% node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
% lists of floats.
%
\edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
\setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
}%
\fi
%
% start with \parskip glue, I guess.
\vskip\parskip
%
% Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
\restorefirstparagraphindent
}
% we have these possibilities:
% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
% @float Foo & no caption: Foo
% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
% @float & no caption:
%
\def\Efloat{%
\let\floatident = \empty
%
% In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
\ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
%
% If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
\ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
\appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
\fi
% the number.
\appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
\fi
%
% Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
% \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
\let\captionline = \floatident
%
\ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
\ifx\floatident\empty \else
\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
\fi
%
% caption text.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
%
% If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
% Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
\ifx\captionline\empty \else
\vskip.5\parskip
\captionline
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% Space below caption.
\vskip\parskip
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
%
% If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
% after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
% Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
% \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
% caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
{%
\atdummies \turnoffactive \otherbackslash
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
% is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
% we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
\scanexp{%
\xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
\ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
\thiscaption
\else
\thisshortcaption
\fi
}%
}%
\immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
\ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}%
\fi
\egroup % end of \vtop
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% place the captured inserts
%
% BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
% insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\checkinserts
}
% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
%
\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @caption, @shortcaption
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
\def\getfloatno#1{%
\ifx#1\relax
% Haven't seen this figure type before.
\csname newcount\endcsname #1%
%
% Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
\expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
\fi
\let\floatno#1%
}
% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
% first read the @float command.
%
\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
% distinguish floats from other xref types.
\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
% \thissection value which we \setref above.
%
\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
%
% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
%
\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
\def\temp{#1}%
\def\iffloattype{#2}%
\ifx\temp\floatmagic
}
% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
%
\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
\def\floattype{#1}% floattype
{%
% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
\indexnofonts
\turnoffactive
\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
}%
%
% \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
\expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
\ifhavexrefs
% if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
\message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
\fi
\else
\begingroup
\leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
\let\do=\listoffloatsdo
\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
\endgroup
\fi
}
% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
%
% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
% they won't appear in the aux file).
%
\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
% Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
% pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
% page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
% in pdf output.
\toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
%
% use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
\edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
\writeentry
}}
\message{localization,}
% and i18n.
% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything
% properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation.
% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
%
\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
\tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
% Read the file if it exists.
\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
\ifeof 1
\errhelp = \nolanghelp
\errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
\else
\input txi-#1.tex
\fi
\closein 1
\endgroup
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory
should work if nowhere else does.}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
% likely, but for now just recognize it.
\let\documentencoding = \comment
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Page size parameters.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
\vbadness = 10000
% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
\hbadness = 2000
% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
\widowpenalty=10000
\clubpenalty=10000
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\def\setemergencystretch{%
\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
\else
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\emergencystretch = .15\hsize
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\fi
}
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8)
% physical page width.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
%
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\voffset = #3\relax
\topskip = #6\relax
\splittopskip = \topskip
%
\vsize = #1\relax
\advance\vsize by \topskip
\outervsize = \vsize
\advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
\pageheight = \vsize
%
\hsize = #2\relax
\outerhsize = \hsize
\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
\pagewidth = \hsize
%
\normaloffset = #4\relax
\bindingoffset = #5\relax
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\ifpdf
\pdfpageheight #7\relax
\pdfpagewidth #8\relax
\fi
%
\setleading{\textleading}
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\parindent = \defaultparindent
\setemergencystretch
}
% @letterpaper (the default).
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\textleading = 13.2pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
% If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
{\voffset}{.25in}%
{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
{11in}{8.5in}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}}
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\textleading = 12pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
{\voffset}{.25in}%
{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
{9.25in}{7in}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
\tolerance = 700
\hfuzz = 1pt
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
\defbodyindent = .5cm
}}
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\textleading = 13.2pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
% prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
% To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
% \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
% do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
% your texinfo source file like this:
% @tex
% \global\normaloffset = -6mm
% \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
% @end tex
\internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
{297mm}{210mm}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\tolerance = 700
\hfuzz = 1pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
\defbodyindent = 5mm
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
\textleading = 12.5pt
%
\internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
{210mm}{148mm}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\lispnarrowing = 0.2in
\tolerance = 800
\hfuzz = 1.2pt
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
\defbodyindent = 2mm
\tableindent = 12mm
}}
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\afourpaper
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
{\voffset}{4.6mm}%
{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
{297mm}{210mm}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\globaldefs = 0
}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\afourpaper
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
{\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
{297mm}{210mm}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\globaldefs = 0
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
\globaldefs = 1
%
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\setleading{\textleading}%
%
\dimen0 = #1
\advance\dimen0 by \voffset
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\dimen2 = \hsize
\advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
%
\internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
{\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
{\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
}}
% Set default to letter.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\letterpaper
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
\catcode`\"=\other
\catcode`\~=\other
\catcode`\^=\other
\catcode`\_=\other
\catcode`\|=\other
\catcode`\<=\other
\catcode`\>=\other
\catcode`\+=\other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\$=\other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\normaldoublequote{"}
\def\normaltilde{~}
\def\normalcaret{^}
\def\normalunderscore{_}
\def\normalverticalbar{|}
\def\normalless{<}
\def\normalgreater{>}
\def\normalplus{+}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
%
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
% this is not a problem.
\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Turn off all special characters except @
% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
\catcode`\"=\active
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
\let"=\activedoublequote
\catcode`\~=\active
\def~{{\tt\char126}}
\chardef\hat=`\^
\catcode`\^=\active
\def^{{\tt \hat}}
\catcode`\_=\active
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
% Subroutine for the previous macro.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\|=\active
\def|{{\tt\char124}}
\chardef \less=`\<
\catcode`\<=\active
\def<{{\tt \less}}
\chardef \gtr=`\>
\catcode`\>=\active
\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
\catcode`\+=\active
\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\$=\active
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
\catcode`\@=0
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
% as in \char`\\.
\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
% catcode other.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
{\catcode`\\=\active
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
\catcode`\\=\active
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
% even after parsing them.
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
@def@turnoffactive{%
@let"=@normaldoublequote
@let\=@realbackslash
@let~=@normaltilde
@let^=@normalcaret
@let_=@normalunderscore
@let|=@normalverticalbar
@let<=@normalless
@let>=@normalgreater
@let+=@normalplus
@let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
@unsepspaces
}
% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
% the literal character `\'. (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
% effect.)
%
@def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
@otherifyactive
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
% a backslash.
%
@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
@global@let\ = @eatinput
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
%
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
@gdef@fixbackslash{%
@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
@catcode`+=@active
@catcode`@_=@active
}
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
@escapechar = `@@
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
@catcode`@& = @other
@catcode`@# = @other
@catcode`@% = @other
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
@c Local variables:
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
@c End:
2019-08-26 11:44:36 +00:00
@c vim:sw=2:
@ignore
arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
@end ignore